{"title":"Air Pillows \u0026 Water Tubes","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\/\",\n \"@type\": \"CollectionPage\",\n \"@id\": \"https:\/\/www.pstpoolsupplies.com\/collections\/winter-pool-air-pillows-and-water-tubes\",\n \"name\": \"Winter Pool Air Pillows \u0026 Water Tubes\",\n \"description\": \"Shop winter pool air pillows and water tubes. GLI \u0026 Swimline ice equalizer pillows 4'x4' to 4'x15' and single\/double chamber cover tubes in 8' and 10'.\",\n \"url\": \"https:\/\/www.pstpoolsupplies.com\/collections\/winter-pool-air-pillows-and-water-tubes\",\n \"provider\": { \"@type\": \"Organization\", \"name\": \"PST Pool Supplies\", \"url\": \"https:\/\/www.pstpoolsupplies.com\" },\n \"offers\": { \"@type\": \"AggregateOffer\", \"priceCurrency\": \"USD\", \"lowPrice\": \"14.00\", \"highPrice\": \"54.80\", \"offerCount\": \"32\" }\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch1\u003eWinter Pool Air Pillows \u0026amp; Water Tubes\u003c\/h1\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIce does not damage a pool by being cold — it damages it by expanding sideways with nowhere to go. \u003cstrong\u003eWinter pool air pillows\u003c\/strong\u003e and water tubes are how you manage that force. A pillow floats in the middle of an above ground pool and gives expanding ice a compressible target; water tubes ballast the edge of an inground cover so wind cannot lift it. PST Pool Supplies carries both from GLI, Swimline, and Pool Pillow Pal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAir pillows\u003c\/strong\u003e — often labeled ice equalizers — come in 4' x 4', 4' x 5', 4' x 8', and 4' x 15' sizes from GLI and Swimline. Size to your pool: a 4' x 4' suits pools up to about 18' round, 4' x 8' covers most 21'–24' pools, and 4' x 15' is for larger or oval installations. Inflate to roughly 50–60% capacity, not drum-tight; a soft pillow compresses when ice pushes and a hard one just bursts. The Pool Pillow Pal centering kit solves the perennial problem of the pillow drifting to one side by midwinter. GLI publishes full sizing specs at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.gliintl.com\/\"\u003eGLI Pool Products\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWater tubes\u003c\/strong\u003e hold a solid inground winter cover down along the deck without drilling anchors. We stock 8' and 10' lengths in single chamber and double chamber, standard and heavy duty, in blue and black. Double chamber tubes are worth the small upcharge — if one baffle splits, the other still holds water and the tube stays put instead of ending up in the pool. Fill each tube only about two-thirds full so there is room for the water inside to freeze and expand. Pair tubes with an \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.pstpoolsupplies.com\/collections\/in-ground-pool-winter-covers-rectangle\"\u003einground winter cover\u003c\/a\u003e, or pillows with an \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.pstpoolsupplies.com\/collections\/above-ground-pool-winter-covers-round-oval\"\u003eabove ground winter cover\u003c\/a\u003e, and add a \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.pstpoolsupplies.com\/collections\/pool-cover-pumps-submersible-water-removal\"\u003ecover pump\u003c\/a\u003e to keep meltwater off the top. Swimline's full winter line is at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.swimline.com\/\"\u003eSwimline\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOrder winter pool air pillows and water tubes with your cover so everything goes on in one trip — and buy one spare pillow, because the one that survives the whole winter is the exception, not the rule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c!-- Meta Description: Shop winter pool air pillows \u0026 water tubes. GLI and Swimline ice equalizer pillows 4'x4' to 4'x15', plus single \u0026 double chamber 8' and 10' cover water tubes. --\u003e\n","products":[{"product_id":"gli-4-x-4-winter-air-pillow-ice-equalizer-for-above-ground-pools-50040","title":"GLI 4' x 4' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, 500404AP","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .glipil-wrap, .glipil-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .glipil-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .glipil-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .glipil-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .glipil-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .glipil-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .glipil-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .glipil-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .glipil-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .glipil-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .glipil-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .glipil-spec-table th, .glipil-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .glipil-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .glipil-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .glipil-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .glipil-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .glipil-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .glipil-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .glipil-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .glipil-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .glipil-footer .glipil-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"glipil-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"glipil-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eGLI 4' x 4' Winter Air Pillow, Above Ground Ice Equalizer\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-subtitle\"\u003eLet the ice squeeze the pillow, not the pool wall.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe GLI 4' x 4' winter air pillow, part 500404AP\u003c\/strong\u003e, floats under an above ground winter cover and gives expanding ice somewhere to go, stocked under SKU PST-500404AP. As the surface freezes, the pillow compresses instead of the pool wall, and it crowns the cover so rain, snowmelt, and leaves shed toward the edges rather than pooling in the middle. Inflate it to roughly 60 to 80 percent, never to full capacity, so there is room left for the ice to push. A pillow is the cheapest piece of winterizing insurance an above ground pool owner can buy.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"glipil-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"glipil-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGLI Pool Products\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWinter air pillow, also called an ice equalizer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4' x 4'\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500404AP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500404AP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy duty vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInflation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 to 80 percent of capacity, never full\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCentered on the water, under the winter cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePool Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove ground\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReplacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreat as a seasonal item, inspect every fall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"glipil-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-q\"\u003eHow much air should go in the pillow?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-a\"\u003eFill it to about \u003cstrong\u003e60 to 80 percent\u003c\/strong\u003e. An overfilled pillow has nowhere to give when ice presses in, and it is the single most common reason pillows split before spring.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-q\"\u003eWhat size pillow does my pool need?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-a\"\u003eAs a rule of thumb, a 4' x 4' suits pools up to about 18' round, a 4' x 8' suits 21' to 28' round, and a 4' x 15' suits large round or oval pools. When in doubt, size up or use two pillows.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-q\"\u003eDo I have to tie the pillow down?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-a\"\u003eYes, keep it centered. Run cord through the grommets to the cover or use an adhesive centering patch kit so the pillow cannot drift to one side and leave the middle of the cover unsupported.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"glipil-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"glipil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"glipil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"glipil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized GLI Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"GLI Pool Products","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289619034177,"sku":"PST-500404AP","price":20.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/94267374-69b3-430b-8ae1-7da9d7c42ed5.jpg?v=1786069312"},{"product_id":"gli-4-x-8-winter-air-pillow-ice-equalizer-for-above-ground-pools-50040","title":"GLI 4' x 8' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, 500408AP","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .glipil-wrap, .glipil-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .glipil-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .glipil-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .glipil-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .glipil-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .glipil-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .glipil-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .glipil-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .glipil-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .glipil-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .glipil-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .glipil-spec-table th, .glipil-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .glipil-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .glipil-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .glipil-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .glipil-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .glipil-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .glipil-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .glipil-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .glipil-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .glipil-footer .glipil-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"glipil-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"glipil-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eGLI 4' x 8' Winter Air Pillow, Above Ground Ice Equalizer\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-subtitle\"\u003eLet the ice squeeze the pillow, not the pool wall.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe GLI 4' x 8' winter air pillow, part 500408AP\u003c\/strong\u003e, floats under an above ground winter cover and gives expanding ice somewhere to go, stocked under SKU PST-500408AP. As the surface freezes, the pillow compresses instead of the pool wall, and it crowns the cover so rain, snowmelt, and leaves shed toward the edges rather than pooling in the middle. Inflate it to roughly 60 to 80 percent, never to full capacity, so there is room left for the ice to push. A pillow is the cheapest piece of winterizing insurance an above ground pool owner can buy.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"glipil-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"glipil-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGLI Pool Products\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWinter air pillow, also called an ice equalizer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4' x 8'\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500408AP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500408AP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy duty vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInflation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 to 80 percent of capacity, never full\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCentered on the water, under the winter cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePool Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove ground\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReplacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreat as a seasonal item, inspect every fall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"glipil-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-q\"\u003eHow much air should go in the pillow?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-a\"\u003eFill it to about \u003cstrong\u003e60 to 80 percent\u003c\/strong\u003e. An overfilled pillow has nowhere to give when ice presses in, and it is the single most common reason pillows split before spring.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-q\"\u003eWhat size pillow does my pool need?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-a\"\u003eAs a rule of thumb, a 4' x 4' suits pools up to about 18' round, a 4' x 8' suits 21' to 28' round, and a 4' x 15' suits large round or oval pools. When in doubt, size up or use two pillows.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-q\"\u003eDo I have to tie the pillow down?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-a\"\u003eYes, keep it centered. Run cord through the grommets to the cover or use an adhesive centering patch kit so the pillow cannot drift to one side and leave the middle of the cover unsupported.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"glipil-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"glipil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"glipil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"glipil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized GLI Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"GLI Pool Products","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289619066945,"sku":"PST-500408AP","price":30.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/94267374-69b3-430b-8ae1-7da9d7c42ed5_038a5a8f-f7c2-4396-8682-1c6f0edb9a2f.jpg?v=1786069365"},{"product_id":"gli-4-x-15-winter-air-pillow-ice-equalizer-for-above-ground-pools-5004","title":"GLI 4' x 15' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, 500415AP","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .glipil-wrap, .glipil-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .glipil-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .glipil-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .glipil-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .glipil-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .glipil-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .glipil-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .glipil-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .glipil-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .glipil-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .glipil-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .glipil-spec-table th, .glipil-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .glipil-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .glipil-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .glipil-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .glipil-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .glipil-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .glipil-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .glipil-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .glipil-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .glipil-footer .glipil-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"glipil-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"glipil-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eGLI 4' x 15' Winter Air Pillow, Above Ground Ice Equalizer\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-subtitle\"\u003eLet the ice squeeze the pillow, not the pool wall.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe GLI 4' x 15' winter air pillow, part 500415AP\u003c\/strong\u003e, floats under an above ground winter cover and gives expanding ice somewhere to go, stocked under SKU PST-500415AP. As the surface freezes, the pillow compresses instead of the pool wall, and it crowns the cover so rain, snowmelt, and leaves shed toward the edges rather than pooling in the middle. Inflate it to roughly 60 to 80 percent, never to full capacity, so there is room left for the ice to push. A pillow is the cheapest piece of winterizing insurance an above ground pool owner can buy.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"glipil-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"glipil-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGLI Pool Products\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWinter air pillow, also called an ice equalizer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4' x 15'\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500415AP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500415AP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy duty vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInflation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 to 80 percent of capacity, never full\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCentered on the water, under the winter cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePool Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove ground\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReplacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreat as a seasonal item, inspect every fall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"glipil-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-q\"\u003eHow much air should go in the pillow?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-a\"\u003eFill it to about \u003cstrong\u003e60 to 80 percent\u003c\/strong\u003e. An overfilled pillow has nowhere to give when ice presses in, and it is the single most common reason pillows split before spring.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-q\"\u003eWhat size pillow does my pool need?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-a\"\u003eAs a rule of thumb, a 4' x 4' suits pools up to about 18' round, a 4' x 8' suits 21' to 28' round, and a 4' x 15' suits large round or oval pools. When in doubt, size up or use two pillows.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"glipil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-q\"\u003eDo I have to tie the pillow down?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"glipil-faq-a\"\u003eYes, keep it centered. Run cord through the grommets to the cover or use an adhesive centering patch kit so the pillow cannot drift to one side and leave the middle of the cover unsupported.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"glipil-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"glipil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"glipil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"glipil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized GLI Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"GLI Pool Products","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289619263553,"sku":"PST-500415AP","price":50.7,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/94267374-69b3-430b-8ae1-7da9d7c42ed5_09e9ab08-28a3-46ea-aeaf-68c0835ff024.jpg?v=1786069517"},{"product_id":"swimline-4-x-4-winter-air-pillow-ice-equalizer-for-above-ground-pools","title":"Swimline 4' x 4' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, WP44","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swpil-wrap, .swpil-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swpil-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swpil-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swpil-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swpil-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swpil-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swpil-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swpil-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swpil-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swpil-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swpil-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swpil-spec-table th, .swpil-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swpil-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swpil-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swpil-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swpil-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swpil-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swpil-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swpil-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swpil-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swpil-footer .swpil-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swpil-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swpil-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 4' x 4' Winter Air Pillow, Above Ground Ice Equalizer\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-subtitle\"\u003eCheap insurance against a cracked pool wall.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 4' x 4' winter air pillow, part WP44\u003c\/strong\u003e, sits between the water and the winter cover and takes the pressure that expanding ice would otherwise put on your pool wall, stocked under SKU PST-WP44. It also lifts the center of the cover so rain and melting snow run to the edges instead of collecting in a heavy pond over the middle. Inflate to roughly 60 to 80 percent so the pillow still has room to compress when the surface freezes. Grommets at the corners let you tie it off and keep it centered all winter.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swpil-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swpil-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWinter air pillow, also called an ice equalizer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4' x 4'\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWP44\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-WP44\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCold resistant vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInflation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 to 80 percent of capacity, never full\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCentered on the water, under the winter cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePool Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove ground\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTie Points\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCorner grommets for cord or a centering patch kit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swpil-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eWhy should I not fill the pillow all the way?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eA pillow at \u003cstrong\u003e60 to 80 percent\u003c\/strong\u003e can flex when ice pushes against it. A drum tight pillow cannot, so the seam takes the load and splits, usually during the first hard freeze.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eWhat size fits my above ground pool?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eA 4' x 4' generally covers pools up to about 18' round, a 4' x 5' suits 18' to 21', a 4' x 8' suits 21' to 28', and a 4' x 15' handles large round and oval pools. Two smaller pillows also work.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eDoes the pillow go on top of the cover or under it?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eUnder it, floating on the water. The cover goes over the pillow so the pillow lifts the middle of the cover and water runs off toward the pool edge.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swpil-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289619361857,"sku":"PST-WP44","price":18.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/PST-WP44.jpg?v=1786084813"},{"product_id":"swimline-4-x-5-winter-air-pillow-ice-equalizer-for-above-ground-pools","title":"Swimline 4' x 5' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, WP45","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swpil-wrap, .swpil-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swpil-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swpil-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swpil-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swpil-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swpil-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swpil-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swpil-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swpil-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swpil-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swpil-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swpil-spec-table th, .swpil-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swpil-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swpil-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swpil-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swpil-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swpil-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swpil-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swpil-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swpil-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swpil-footer .swpil-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swpil-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swpil-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 4' x 5' Winter Air Pillow, Above Ground Ice Equalizer\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-subtitle\"\u003eCheap insurance against a cracked pool wall.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 4' x 5' winter air pillow, part WP45\u003c\/strong\u003e, sits between the water and the winter cover and takes the pressure that expanding ice would otherwise put on your pool wall, stocked under SKU PST-WP45. It also lifts the center of the cover so rain and melting snow run to the edges instead of collecting in a heavy pond over the middle. Inflate to roughly 60 to 80 percent so the pillow still has room to compress when the surface freezes. Grommets at the corners let you tie it off and keep it centered all winter.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swpil-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swpil-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWinter air pillow, also called an ice equalizer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4' x 5'\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWP45\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-WP45\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCold resistant vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInflation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 to 80 percent of capacity, never full\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCentered on the water, under the winter cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePool Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove ground\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTie Points\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCorner grommets for cord or a centering patch kit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swpil-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eWhy should I not fill the pillow all the way?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eA pillow at \u003cstrong\u003e60 to 80 percent\u003c\/strong\u003e can flex when ice pushes against it. A drum tight pillow cannot, so the seam takes the load and splits, usually during the first hard freeze.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eWhat size fits my above ground pool?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eA 4' x 4' generally covers pools up to about 18' round, a 4' x 5' suits 18' to 21', a 4' x 8' suits 21' to 28', and a 4' x 15' handles large round and oval pools. Two smaller pillows also work.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eDoes the pillow go on top of the cover or under it?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eUnder it, floating on the water. The cover goes over the pillow so the pillow lifts the middle of the cover and water runs off toward the pool edge.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swpil-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289619394625,"sku":"PST-WP45","price":19.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/PST-WP45.jpg?v=1786084812"},{"product_id":"swimline-4-x-8-winter-air-pillow-ice-equalizer-for-above-ground-pools","title":"Swimline 4' x 8' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, WP48","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swpil-wrap, .swpil-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swpil-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swpil-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swpil-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swpil-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swpil-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swpil-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swpil-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swpil-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swpil-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swpil-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swpil-spec-table th, .swpil-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swpil-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swpil-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swpil-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swpil-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swpil-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swpil-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swpil-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swpil-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swpil-footer .swpil-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swpil-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swpil-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 4' x 8' Winter Air Pillow, Above Ground Ice Equalizer\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-subtitle\"\u003eCheap insurance against a cracked pool wall.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 4' x 8' winter air pillow, part WP48\u003c\/strong\u003e, sits between the water and the winter cover and takes the pressure that expanding ice would otherwise put on your pool wall, stocked under SKU PST-WP48. It also lifts the center of the cover so rain and melting snow run to the edges instead of collecting in a heavy pond over the middle. Inflate to roughly 60 to 80 percent so the pillow still has room to compress when the surface freezes. Grommets at the corners let you tie it off and keep it centered all winter.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swpil-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swpil-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWinter air pillow, also called an ice equalizer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4' x 8'\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWP48\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-WP48\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCold resistant vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInflation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 to 80 percent of capacity, never full\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCentered on the water, under the winter cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePool Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove ground\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTie Points\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCorner grommets for cord or a centering patch kit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swpil-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eWhy should I not fill the pillow all the way?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eA pillow at \u003cstrong\u003e60 to 80 percent\u003c\/strong\u003e can flex when ice pushes against it. A drum tight pillow cannot, so the seam takes the load and splits, usually during the first hard freeze.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eWhat size fits my above ground pool?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eA 4' x 4' generally covers pools up to about 18' round, a 4' x 5' suits 18' to 21', a 4' x 8' suits 21' to 28', and a 4' x 15' handles large round and oval pools. Two smaller pillows also work.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eDoes the pillow go on top of the cover or under it?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eUnder it, floating on the water. The cover goes over the pillow so the pillow lifts the middle of the cover and water runs off toward the pool edge.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swpil-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289619525697,"sku":"PST-WP48","price":26.3,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/PST-WP48.jpg?v=1786084812"},{"product_id":"swimline-4-x-15-winter-air-pillow-ice-equalizer-for-above-ground-pools","title":"Swimline 4' x 15' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, WP415","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swpil-wrap, .swpil-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swpil-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swpil-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swpil-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swpil-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swpil-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swpil-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swpil-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swpil-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swpil-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swpil-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swpil-spec-table th, .swpil-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swpil-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swpil-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swpil-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swpil-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swpil-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swpil-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swpil-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swpil-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swpil-footer .swpil-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swpil-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swpil-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 4' x 15' Winter Air Pillow, Above Ground Ice Equalizer\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-subtitle\"\u003eCheap insurance against a cracked pool wall.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 4' x 15' winter air pillow, part WP415\u003c\/strong\u003e, sits between the water and the winter cover and takes the pressure that expanding ice would otherwise put on your pool wall, stocked under SKU PST-WP415. It also lifts the center of the cover so rain and melting snow run to the edges instead of collecting in a heavy pond over the middle. Inflate to roughly 60 to 80 percent so the pillow still has room to compress when the surface freezes. Grommets at the corners let you tie it off and keep it centered all winter.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swpil-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swpil-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWinter air pillow, also called an ice equalizer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4' x 15'\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWP415\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-WP415\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCold resistant vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInflation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 to 80 percent of capacity, never full\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCentered on the water, under the winter cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePool Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove ground\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTie Points\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCorner grommets for cord or a centering patch kit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swpil-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eWhy should I not fill the pillow all the way?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eA pillow at \u003cstrong\u003e60 to 80 percent\u003c\/strong\u003e can flex when ice pushes against it. A drum tight pillow cannot, so the seam takes the load and splits, usually during the first hard freeze.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eWhat size fits my above ground pool?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eA 4' x 4' generally covers pools up to about 18' round, a 4' x 5' suits 18' to 21', a 4' x 8' suits 21' to 28', and a 4' x 15' handles large round and oval pools. Two smaller pillows also work.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swpil-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-q\"\u003eDoes the pillow go on top of the cover or under it?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swpil-faq-a\"\u003eUnder it, floating on the water. The cover goes over the pillow so the pillow lifts the middle of the cover and water runs off toward the pool edge.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swpil-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swpil-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289619558465,"sku":"PST-WP415","price":46.1,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/PST-WP415.jpg?v=1786084814"},{"product_id":"pool-pillow-pal-air-pillow-centering-kit-for-winter-pool-covers-poolpi","title":"Pool Pillow Pal Air Pillow Centering Kit for Winter Pool Covers, POOLPILLOWPAL","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .pilpal-wrap, .pilpal-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .pilpal-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .pilpal-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .pilpal-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .pilpal-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .pilpal-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .pilpal-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .pilpal-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .pilpal-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .pilpal-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .pilpal-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .pilpal-spec-table th, .pilpal-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .pilpal-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .pilpal-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .pilpal-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .pilpal-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .pilpal-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .pilpal-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .pilpal-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .pilpal-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .pilpal-footer .pilpal-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"pilpal-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"pilpal-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003ePool Pillow Pal, Air Pillow Centering Kit for Winter Covers\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"pilpal-subtitle\"\u003eNo ropes, no ties, no pillow drifting to the shallow end.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"pilpal-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePool Pillow Pal, part POOLPILLOWPAL\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a two patch kit that joins your winter air pillow directly to the underside of the winter cover so the pillow stays centered all season, stocked under SKU PST-POOLPILLOWPAL. One patch sticks to the pillow, the other to the center of the cover, and the two press together so the pillow and cover go on and come off as one piece. That replaces the usual routine of running cord through grommets and hoping the knots hold. A pillow that stays centered keeps doing its job, which is holding the crown of the cover up and taking the pressure of expanding ice.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"pilpal-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"pilpal-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"pilpal-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePool Pillow Pal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAir pillow centering and attachment kit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePOOLPILLOWPAL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-POOLPILLOWPAL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eContents\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo flexible patches, one for the pillow and one for the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttachment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdhesive backed patches that press together\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWorks With\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard winter air pillows and winter covers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePool Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove ground and in ground winter cover setups\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInstall Tip\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSurfaces must be clean and dry before the patches are applied\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePillow Fill\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInflate the pillow to about 80 percent before joining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"pilpal-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"pilpal-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"pilpal-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"pilpal-faq-q\"\u003eHow do I find the center of my cover?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"pilpal-faq-a\"\u003eFold the cover in half, then in half again. The corner where the folds meet is the center. Mark it, then apply the cover patch there while the vinyl is clean and dry.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"pilpal-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"pilpal-faq-q\"\u003eDo I still need to tie the pillow with rope?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"pilpal-faq-a\"\u003eNo. That is the point of the kit. The two patches hold the pillow to the cover, so the pillow and cover lift on and off the pool together with no cord through the grommets.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"pilpal-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"pilpal-faq-q\"\u003eCan I reuse it next season?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"pilpal-faq-a\"\u003eThe patches stay on the cover and the pillow, so as long as both survive the winter you can simply press them back together. Plan on a fresh kit whenever you replace the pillow or the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"pilpal-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"pilpal-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"pilpal-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"pilpal-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Pool Pillow Pal Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Pool Pillow Pal","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289619624001,"sku":"PST-POOLPILLOWPAL","price":19.3,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_011.png?v=1785942932"},{"product_id":"gli-heavy-duty-8-double-chamber-water-tube-black-for-in-ground-winter","title":"GLI Heavy Duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black for In Ground Winter Covers, 500008WTDHDBLK","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .gliwthd-wrap, .gliwthd-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .gliwthd-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .gliwthd-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .gliwthd-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .gliwthd-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .gliwthd-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .gliwthd-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwthd-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .gliwthd-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .gliwthd-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .gliwthd-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwthd-spec-table th, .gliwthd-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .gliwthd-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .gliwthd-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .gliwthd-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwthd-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .gliwthd-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwthd-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .gliwthd-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .gliwthd-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .gliwthd-footer .gliwthd-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"gliwthd-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eGLI Heavy Duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-subtitle\"\u003eThicker vinyl for the pools that go through real winter.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe GLI heavy duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black, part 500008WTDHDBLK\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a thicker walled version of the standard water tube, built for climates where the deck ices over and stays that way, stocked under SKU PST-500008WTDHDBLK. It lays along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and holds it against wind without the liner risk that comes from weighting a cover with blocks or bricks. The double chamber design means one puncture does not empty the whole tube. Fill each chamber about three quarters full so the ice has somewhere to expand.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwthd-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"gliwthd-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGLI Pool Products\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500008WTDHDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500008WTDHDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy duty, thicker wall than the standard tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug on each chamber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest For\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHard freeze regions and multi season reuse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwthd-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-q\"\u003eWhat makes the heavy duty tube different?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-a\"\u003eThicker vinyl. It resists abrasion on rough concrete and stone coping and holds up better to repeated freeze and thaw cycles, so it usually survives more seasons than a standard tube.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill it?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e per chamber. Heavier vinyl does not change the physics, water still expands when it freezes and a tube filled to the cap will burst.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-q\"\u003eHow many tubes should I order?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-a\"\u003eEnough to lay end to end all the way around the cover. Divide your pool perimeter in feet by the tube length, then add a couple of spares, since a split tube in January is hard to replace.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"gliwthd-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"gliwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"gliwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"gliwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized GLI Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"GLI Pool Products","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289619853377,"sku":"PST-500008WTDHDBLK","price":26.1,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_2f096903-1b54-4844-8a94-0689d92e971b.png?v=1785943959"},{"product_id":"gli-heavy-duty-8-double-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-c","title":"GLI Heavy Duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 500008WTDHDBLU","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .gliwthd-wrap, .gliwthd-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .gliwthd-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .gliwthd-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .gliwthd-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .gliwthd-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .gliwthd-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .gliwthd-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwthd-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .gliwthd-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .gliwthd-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .gliwthd-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwthd-spec-table th, .gliwthd-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .gliwthd-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .gliwthd-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .gliwthd-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwthd-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .gliwthd-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwthd-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .gliwthd-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .gliwthd-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .gliwthd-footer .gliwthd-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"gliwthd-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eGLI Heavy Duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-subtitle\"\u003eThicker vinyl for the pools that go through real winter.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe GLI heavy duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part 500008WTDHDBLU\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a thicker walled version of the standard water tube, built for climates where the deck ices over and stays that way, stocked under SKU PST-500008WTDHDBLU. It lays along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and holds it against wind without the liner risk that comes from weighting a cover with blocks or bricks. The double chamber design means one puncture does not empty the whole tube. Fill each chamber about three quarters full so the ice has somewhere to expand.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwthd-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"gliwthd-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGLI Pool Products\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500008WTDHDBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500008WTDHDBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy duty, thicker wall than the standard tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug on each chamber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest For\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHard freeze regions and multi season reuse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwthd-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-q\"\u003eWhat makes the heavy duty tube different?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-a\"\u003eThicker vinyl. It resists abrasion on rough concrete and stone coping and holds up better to repeated freeze and thaw cycles, so it usually survives more seasons than a standard tube.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill it?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e per chamber. Heavier vinyl does not change the physics, water still expands when it freezes and a tube filled to the cap will burst.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-q\"\u003eHow many tubes should I order?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-a\"\u003eEnough to lay end to end all the way around the cover. Divide your pool perimeter in feet by the tube length, then add a couple of spares, since a split tube in January is hard to replace.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"gliwthd-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"gliwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"gliwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"gliwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized GLI Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"GLI Pool Products","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289619886145,"sku":"PST-500008WTDHDBLU","price":26.1,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_3db32f55-0216-4a9e-8db2-1f720777aad5.png?v=1785943959"},{"product_id":"gli-heavy-duty-10-double-chamber-water-tube-black-for-in-ground-winter","title":"GLI Heavy Duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black for In Ground Winter Covers, 500010WTDHDBLK","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .gliwthd-wrap, .gliwthd-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .gliwthd-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .gliwthd-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .gliwthd-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .gliwthd-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .gliwthd-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .gliwthd-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwthd-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .gliwthd-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .gliwthd-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .gliwthd-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwthd-spec-table th, .gliwthd-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .gliwthd-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .gliwthd-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .gliwthd-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwthd-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .gliwthd-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwthd-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .gliwthd-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .gliwthd-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .gliwthd-footer .gliwthd-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"gliwthd-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eGLI Heavy Duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-subtitle\"\u003eThicker vinyl for the pools that go through real winter.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe GLI heavy duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black, part 500010WTDHDBLK\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a thicker walled version of the standard water tube, built for climates where the deck ices over and stays that way, stocked under SKU PST-500010WTDHDBLK. It lays along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and holds it against wind without the liner risk that comes from weighting a cover with blocks or bricks. The double chamber design means one puncture does not empty the whole tube. Fill each chamber about three quarters full so the ice has somewhere to expand.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwthd-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"gliwthd-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGLI Pool Products\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500010WTDHDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500010WTDHDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy duty, thicker wall than the standard tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug on each chamber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest For\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHard freeze regions and multi season reuse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwthd-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-q\"\u003eWhat makes the heavy duty tube different?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-a\"\u003eThicker vinyl. It resists abrasion on rough concrete and stone coping and holds up better to repeated freeze and thaw cycles, so it usually survives more seasons than a standard tube.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill it?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e per chamber. Heavier vinyl does not change the physics, water still expands when it freezes and a tube filled to the cap will burst.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-q\"\u003eHow many tubes should I order?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwthd-faq-a\"\u003eEnough to lay end to end all the way around the cover. Divide your pool perimeter in feet by the tube length, then add a couple of spares, since a split tube in January is hard to replace.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"gliwthd-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"gliwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"gliwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"gliwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized GLI Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"GLI Pool Products","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289619951681,"sku":"PST-500010WTDHDBLK","price":28.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_9fd18940-a621-455b-902c-d22fd48f0eb1.png?v=1785943960"},{"product_id":"swimline-8-single-chamber-water-tube-black-for-in-ground-winter-covers","title":"Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black for In Ground Winter Covers, 500008WTSHDBLK","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black, part 500008WTSHDBLK\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-500008WTSHDBLK. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500008WTSHDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500008WTSHDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620115521,"sku":"PST-500008WTSHDBLK","price":20.1,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012.png?v=1785942933"},{"product_id":"swimline-8-single-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-covers","title":"Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 500008WTSHDBLU","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part 500008WTSHDBLU\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-500008WTSHDBLU. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500008WTSHDBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500008WTSHDBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620148289,"sku":"PST-500008WTSHDBLU","price":20.1,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_e912640e-f6b7-46a0-a191-0870de55e875.png?v=1785942934"},{"product_id":"swimline-10-single-chamber-water-tube-black-for-in-ground-winter-cover","title":"Swimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black for In Ground Winter Covers, 500010WTSHDBLK","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black, part 500010WTSHDBLK\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-500010WTSHDBLK. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500010WTSHDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500010WTSHDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620213825,"sku":"PST-500010WTSHDBLK","price":21.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_8db17916-6b9f-464a-9d68-abca8fb6022a.png?v=1785942934"},{"product_id":"swimline-10-single-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-covers","title":"Swimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 500010WTSHDBLU","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part 500010WTSHDBLU\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-500010WTSHDBLU. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500010WTSHDBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500010WTSHDBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620279361,"sku":"PST-500010WTSHDBLU","price":21.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_8153a70e-3d1f-4c96-84e4-d291c66c5aae.png?v=1785942935"},{"product_id":"gli-standard-duty-8-double-chamber-water-tube-black-for-in-ground-wint","title":"GLI Standard Duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black for In Ground Winter Covers, 500008WTDBLK","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .gliwts-wrap, .gliwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .gliwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .gliwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .gliwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .gliwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .gliwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .gliwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .gliwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .gliwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .gliwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwts-spec-table th, .gliwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .gliwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .gliwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .gliwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .gliwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .gliwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .gliwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .gliwts-footer .gliwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"gliwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eGLI Standard Duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-subtitle\"\u003eHolds the cover down without gouging the liner.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe GLI standard duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black, part 500008WTDBLK\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck and pins the edge of a solid in ground winter cover, stocked under SKU PST-500008WTDBLK. Water tubes are the right way to weight a winter cover, because unlike bricks, blocks, or sandbags they cannot chip the coping or tear the liner if they slide in. This one is a double chamber tube, so a puncture in one side still leaves the other side full and the cover held. Fill each chamber to roughly three quarters so the water has room to expand when it freezes.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"gliwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGLI Pool Products\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500008WTDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500008WTDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard duty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug on each chamber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should a water tube be?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Water expands as it freezes, and a tube filled to the cap has nowhere to put that expansion, so the seam or the cap end fails over the winter.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow many tubes do I need?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eEnough to run end to end around the whole cover with no gaps. Add up the perimeter of your pool in feet and divide by the tube length. Gaps are where wind gets under the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhy a water tube instead of bricks or blocks?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eWater tubes are soft. A block or brick that slides off the deck can chip coping, tear a solid cover, or drop through and damage the liner. A tube just slumps and stays put.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"gliwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized GLI Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"GLI Pool Products","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620312129,"sku":"PST-500008WTDBLK","price":24.7,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_009.png?v=1785943961"},{"product_id":"gli-standard-duty-8-double-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winte","title":"GLI Standard Duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 500008WTDBLU","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .gliwts-wrap, .gliwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .gliwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .gliwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .gliwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .gliwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .gliwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .gliwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .gliwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .gliwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .gliwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwts-spec-table th, .gliwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .gliwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .gliwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .gliwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .gliwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .gliwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .gliwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .gliwts-footer .gliwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"gliwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eGLI Standard Duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-subtitle\"\u003eHolds the cover down without gouging the liner.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe GLI standard duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part 500008WTDBLU\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck and pins the edge of a solid in ground winter cover, stocked under SKU PST-500008WTDBLU. Water tubes are the right way to weight a winter cover, because unlike bricks, blocks, or sandbags they cannot chip the coping or tear the liner if they slide in. This one is a double chamber tube, so a puncture in one side still leaves the other side full and the cover held. Fill each chamber to roughly three quarters so the water has room to expand when it freezes.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"gliwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGLI Pool Products\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500008WTDBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500008WTDBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard duty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug on each chamber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should a water tube be?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Water expands as it freezes, and a tube filled to the cap has nowhere to put that expansion, so the seam or the cap end fails over the winter.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow many tubes do I need?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eEnough to run end to end around the whole cover with no gaps. Add up the perimeter of your pool in feet and divide by the tube length. Gaps are where wind gets under the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhy a water tube instead of bricks or blocks?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eWater tubes are soft. A block or brick that slides off the deck can chip coping, tear a solid cover, or drop through and damage the liner. A tube just slumps and stays put.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"gliwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized GLI Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"GLI Pool Products","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620410433,"sku":"PST-500008WTDBLU","price":24.7,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_009_b9bdade4-9b44-4895-87cc-b1f246419206.png?v=1785943962"},{"product_id":"gli-standard-duty-10-double-chamber-water-tube-black-for-in-ground-win","title":"GLI Standard Duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black for In Ground Winter Covers, 500010WTDBLK","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .gliwts-wrap, .gliwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .gliwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .gliwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .gliwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .gliwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .gliwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .gliwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .gliwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .gliwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .gliwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwts-spec-table th, .gliwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .gliwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .gliwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .gliwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .gliwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .gliwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .gliwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .gliwts-footer .gliwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"gliwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eGLI Standard Duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-subtitle\"\u003eHolds the cover down without gouging the liner.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe GLI standard duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black, part 500010WTDBLK\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck and pins the edge of a solid in ground winter cover, stocked under SKU PST-500010WTDBLK. Water tubes are the right way to weight a winter cover, because unlike bricks, blocks, or sandbags they cannot chip the coping or tear the liner if they slide in. This one is a double chamber tube, so a puncture in one side still leaves the other side full and the cover held. Fill each chamber to roughly three quarters so the water has room to expand when it freezes.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"gliwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGLI Pool Products\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500010WTDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500010WTDBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard duty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug on each chamber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should a water tube be?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Water expands as it freezes, and a tube filled to the cap has nowhere to put that expansion, so the seam or the cap end fails over the winter.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow many tubes do I need?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eEnough to run end to end around the whole cover with no gaps. Add up the perimeter of your pool in feet and divide by the tube length. Gaps are where wind gets under the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhy a water tube instead of bricks or blocks?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eWater tubes are soft. A block or brick that slides off the deck can chip coping, tear a solid cover, or drop through and damage the liner. A tube just slumps and stays put.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"gliwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized GLI Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"GLI Pool Products","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620443201,"sku":"PST-500010WTDBLK","price":27.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_009_c6a80fcf-a32f-4471-9d77-919071eb87e4.png?v=1785943962"},{"product_id":"gli-standard-duty-10-double-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-wint","title":"GLI Standard Duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 500010WTDBLU","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .gliwts-wrap, .gliwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .gliwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .gliwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .gliwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .gliwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .gliwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .gliwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .gliwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .gliwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .gliwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwts-spec-table th, .gliwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .gliwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .gliwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .gliwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .gliwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .gliwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .gliwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .gliwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .gliwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .gliwts-footer .gliwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"gliwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eGLI Standard Duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-subtitle\"\u003eHolds the cover down without gouging the liner.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe GLI standard duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part 500010WTDBLU\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck and pins the edge of a solid in ground winter cover, stocked under SKU PST-500010WTDBLU. Water tubes are the right way to weight a winter cover, because unlike bricks, blocks, or sandbags they cannot chip the coping or tear the liner if they slide in. This one is a double chamber tube, so a puncture in one side still leaves the other side full and the cover held. Fill each chamber to roughly three quarters so the water has room to expand when it freezes.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"gliwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGLI Pool Products\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500010WTDBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500010WTDBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard duty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug on each chamber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"gliwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should a water tube be?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Water expands as it freezes, and a tube filled to the cap has nowhere to put that expansion, so the seam or the cap end fails over the winter.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow many tubes do I need?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eEnough to run end to end around the whole cover with no gaps. Add up the perimeter of your pool in feet and divide by the tube length. Gaps are where wind gets under the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"gliwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhy a water tube instead of bricks or blocks?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"gliwts-faq-a\"\u003eWater tubes are soft. A block or brick that slides off the deck can chip coping, tear a solid cover, or drop through and damage the liner. A tube just slumps and stays put.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"gliwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"gliwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized GLI Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"GLI Pool Products","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620508737,"sku":"PST-500010WTDBLU","price":27.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_009_3679715a-c246-4fa2-a68b-4286b8268599.png?v=1785943963"},{"product_id":"swimline-8-single-chamber-water-tube-black-for-in-ground-winter-covers-500008wtsblk","title":"Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black for In Ground Winter Covers, 500008WTSBLK","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black, part 500008WTSBLK\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-500008WTSBLK. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500008WTSBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500008WTSBLK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620574273,"sku":"PST-500008WTSBLK","price":18.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_9a86836e-1874-4dee-865c-63a912e6c23d.png?v=1785942935"},{"product_id":"swimline-8-single-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-covers-500008wtsblu","title":"Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 500008WTSBLU","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part 500008WTSBLU\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-500008WTSBLU. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500008WTSBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500008WTSBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620607041,"sku":"PST-500008WTSBLU","price":18.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_4ed6b6bc-09fd-47a0-87bd-b9922e29ffa3.png?v=1785942936"},{"product_id":"swimline-10-single-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-covers-500010wtsblu","title":"Swimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 500010WTSBLU","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part 500010WTSBLU\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-500010WTSBLU. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500010WTSBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-500010WTSBLU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620803649,"sku":"PST-500010WTSBLU","price":19.9,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_7717e708-d08d-4985-bf13-2ab1374519cd.png?v=1785942936"},{"product_id":"swimline-heavy-duty-8-double-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-win","title":"Swimline Heavy Duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, VWT8D20","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwthd-wrap, .swwthd-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwthd-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwthd-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwthd-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwthd-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwthd-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwthd-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwthd-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwthd-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwthd-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwthd-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwthd-spec-table th, .swwthd-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwthd-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwthd-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwthd-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwthd-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwthd-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwthd-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwthd-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwthd-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwthd-footer .swwthd-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwthd-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline Heavy Duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-subtitle\"\u003eHeavier vinyl, more seasons out of the same bag.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline heavy duty 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part VWT8D20\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a thicker walled water bag for weighting a solid in ground winter cover, stocked under SKU PST-VWT8D20. Heavier vinyl matters on stone, brick, and broom finished concrete, where a thin tube abrades through in a season or two. The double chamber build keeps half the water in place if one side gets punctured, so the cover edge stays pinned. Fill each chamber about three quarters full so freezing water has room to expand.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwthd-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwthd-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVWT8D20\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-VWT8D20\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy duty, thicker wall than the standard tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug on each chamber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest For\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRough coping, stone decks, and hard freeze regions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwthd-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-q\"\u003eIs the heavy duty tube worth the extra cost?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-a\"\u003eIf your deck is stone, brick, or rough concrete, yes. The thicker vinyl resists abrasion and freeze damage, and it typically outlasts a standard tube by a season or more.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should each chamber be?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both chambers need air space so the water can expand into it when the tube freezes solid.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-q\"\u003eHow many do I need for my pool?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-a\"\u003eEnough to sit end to end all the way around the cover with no gaps. Take the pool perimeter in feet, divide by the tube length, and round up.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwthd-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620836417,"sku":"PST-VWT8D20","price":25.3,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_010.png?v=1785943963"},{"product_id":"swimline-heavy-duty-10-double-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-wi","title":"Swimline Heavy Duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, VWT10D20","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwthd-wrap, .swwthd-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwthd-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwthd-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwthd-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwthd-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwthd-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwthd-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwthd-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwthd-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwthd-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwthd-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwthd-spec-table th, .swwthd-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwthd-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwthd-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwthd-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwthd-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwthd-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwthd-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwthd-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwthd-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwthd-footer .swwthd-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwthd-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline Heavy Duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-subtitle\"\u003eHeavier vinyl, more seasons out of the same bag.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline heavy duty 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part VWT10D20\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a thicker walled water bag for weighting a solid in ground winter cover, stocked under SKU PST-VWT10D20. Heavier vinyl matters on stone, brick, and broom finished concrete, where a thin tube abrades through in a season or two. The double chamber build keeps half the water in place if one side gets punctured, so the cover edge stays pinned. Fill each chamber about three quarters full so freezing water has room to expand.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwthd-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwthd-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVWT10D20\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-VWT10D20\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy duty, thicker wall than the standard tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber vinyl, heat sealed seams\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug on each chamber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest For\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRough coping, stone decks, and hard freeze regions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwthd-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-q\"\u003eIs the heavy duty tube worth the extra cost?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-a\"\u003eIf your deck is stone, brick, or rough concrete, yes. The thicker vinyl resists abrasion and freeze damage, and it typically outlasts a standard tube by a season or more.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should each chamber be?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both chambers need air space so the water can expand into it when the tube freezes solid.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwthd-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-q\"\u003eHow many do I need for my pool?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwthd-faq-a\"\u003eEnough to sit end to end all the way around the cover with no gaps. Take the pool perimeter in feet, divide by the tube length, and round up.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwthd-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwthd-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289620934721,"sku":"PST-VWT10D20","price":28.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_010_0db27d77-246d-4452-9161-521edc4a4e14.png?v=1785943964"},{"product_id":"swimline-8-single-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-covers-vwt820","title":"Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, VWT820","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part VWT820\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-VWT820. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVWT820\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-VWT820\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289621000257,"sku":"PST-VWT820","price":19.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_eab2c628-4342-4854-a038-a059b1a90204.png?v=1785942937"},{"product_id":"swimline-10-single-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-covers-vwt1020","title":"Swimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, VWT1020","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part VWT1020\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-VWT1020. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVWT1020\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-VWT1020\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289621033025,"sku":"PST-VWT1020","price":21.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_82a1ac1c-afed-4a6a-a0d0-4e0bd5a2bec2.png?v=1785942937"},{"product_id":"swimline-8-double-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-covers","title":"Swimline 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, VWT8D","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part VWT8D\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-VWT8D. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVWT8D\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-VWT8D\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289621098561,"sku":"PST-VWT8D","price":24.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_4278fbb0-4d41-4150-ae27-ff6c135341a7.png?v=1785942938"},{"product_id":"swimline-10-double-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-covers","title":"Swimline 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, VWT10D","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part VWT10D\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-VWT10D. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVWT10D\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-VWT10D\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289621131329,"sku":"PST-VWT10D","price":27.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_6d19521b-9baa-425f-b42d-94bf54ea65da.png?v=1785942938"},{"product_id":"swimline-4-single-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-covers","title":"Swimline 4' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, VWT4","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 4' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 4' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part VWT4\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-VWT4. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVWT4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-VWT4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289621196865,"sku":"PST-VWT4","price":14.1,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_ee90dae5-6917-418d-b6af-635477c23967.png?v=1785942939"},{"product_id":"swimline-8-single-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-covers-vwt8","title":"Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, VWT8","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part VWT8\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-VWT8. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVWT8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-VWT8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289621262401,"sku":"PST-VWT8","price":18.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_acfd93b0-094a-4861-b796-4621e4b9fe15.png?v=1785942940"},{"product_id":"swimline-10-single-chamber-water-tube-blue-for-in-ground-winter-covers-vwt10","title":"Swimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, VWT10","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue, part VWT10\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-VWT10. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10' Single Chamber Water Tube, Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVWT10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-VWT10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289621327937,"sku":"PST-VWT10","price":19.7,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/Air_Pillows___Water_Tubes_012_346c9f07-2798-4df1-a099-46b262ee17ef.png?v=1785942940"},{"product_id":"swimline-2-x-2-corner-water-tube-for-in-ground-winter-covers-vwt22","title":"Swimline 2' x 2' Corner Water Tube for In Ground Winter Covers, VWT22","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .swwts-wrap, .swwts-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .swwts-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } \/* Title bar (flat, no gradient) *\/ .swwts-title { border-bottom: 3px solid #8a8a8a; padding-bottom: 12px; margin-bottom: 20px; } .swwts-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.6em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .swwts-subtitle { margin: 4px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.95em; font-style: italic; } \/* Intro *\/ .swwts-intro { margin: 0 0 24px; font-size: 1em; color: #333; } \/* Spec table *\/ .swwts-spec-section { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-spec-heading { font-size: 0.85em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.06em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .swwts-spec-table { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 0.95em; } .swwts-spec-table tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; } .swwts-spec-table tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-spec-table th, .swwts-spec-table td { text-align: left; padding: 8px 12px; vertical-align: top; } .swwts-spec-table th { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; width: 42%; background: #f7f8fc; } .swwts-spec-table td { color: #1a1a1a; } \/* FAQ (optional) *\/ .swwts-faq { margin-bottom: 24px; } .swwts-faq-item { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8ecf3; padding: 12px 0; } .swwts-faq-item:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .swwts-faq-q { font-weight: 600; color: #2a2a2a; margin: 0 0 4px; font-size: 0.98em; } .swwts-faq-a { margin: 0; color: #333; font-size: 0.95em; } \/* Footer perks line *\/ .swwts-footer { border-top: 1px solid #e1e6ed; padding-top: 14px; margin-top: 24px; text-align: center; color: #555; font-size: 0.9em; } .swwts-footer .swwts-dot { color: #8a8a8a; margin: 0 8px; font-weight: 700; }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"swwts-wrap\"\u003e \u003cheader class=\"swwts-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eSwimline 2' x 2' Corner Water Tube, In Ground Winter Cover Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-subtitle\"\u003eThe safe way to hold a winter cover down.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/header\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-intro\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Swimline 2' x 2' Corner Water Tube, part VWT22\u003c\/strong\u003e, is a vinyl water bag that lays on the deck along the edge of a solid in ground winter cover and keeps wind from getting underneath, stocked under SKU PST-VWT22. Water tubes are what the cover was designed to be held down with, since a tube that shifts cannot chip coping or tear a liner the way a brick, block, or paver can. Fill it to roughly three quarters, not to the cap, because the water inside expands when it freezes and a full tube splits. Buy enough to run the tubes end to end with no gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-spec-section\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/div\u003e \u003ctable class=\"swwts-spec-table\"\u003e \u003ctbody\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwimline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2' x 2' Corner Water Tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel \/ MPN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVWT22\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-VWT22\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat sealed vinyl water bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClosure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScrew cap fill plug\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill Level\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 75 percent, leave room for ice expansion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeighting solid winter covers on in ground pools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd to end around the full perimeter of the cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFall closing through spring opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrain fully, dry, and store flat out of sunlight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/tbody\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003csection class=\"swwts-faq\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-spec-heading\"\u003eGood to Know\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eHow full should I fill a water tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eAbout \u003cstrong\u003ethree quarters\u003c\/strong\u003e. Leave air space so the water can expand when it freezes. Topping a tube off to the cap is the fastest way to find yourself buying replacements in March.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between a single and a double chamber tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eA double chamber tube is two sealed compartments in one bag, so a puncture on one side still leaves the other side full and the cover weighted. A single chamber tube empties completely.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"swwts-faq-item\"\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-q\"\u003eShould I use a corner tube?\u003c\/p\u003e \u003cp class=\"swwts-faq-a\"\u003eOn a rectangular pool, yes. A short corner unit sits into the corner where a long straight tube leaves a gap, and gaps are exactly where winter wind lifts the cover.\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/section\u003e \u003cfooter class=\"swwts-footer\"\u003e Free Shipping\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003e30-Day Returns\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eWarranty Backed\u003cspan class=\"swwts-dot\"\u003e•\u003c\/span\u003eAuthorized Swimline Dealer \u003c\/footer\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Swimline","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44289621393473,"sku":"PST-VWT22","price":14.1,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/VWT22.jpg?v=1785942941"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-4x8-winter-air-pillow-above-ground-nw151","title":"Blue Wave 4' x 8' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, NW151","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw151-wrap, .bwnw151-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw151-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw151-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw151-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw151-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw151-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw151-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw151-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw151-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw151-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw151-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw151-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw151-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw151-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw151-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw151-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw151-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw151-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw151-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw151-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw151-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw151-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw151-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 4' x 8' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, NW151\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw151-subtitle\"\u003eLifts the center of an above-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw151-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW151\u003c\/strong\u003e is a 4 ft x 8 ft winter air pillow for above-ground pools. Inflate it and set it in the center of the pool under the winter cover. The raised center helps keep snow and leaves from collecting in the middle of the cover, and the pillow takes up pressure from expanding ice that would otherwise press on the pool wall and liner.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw151-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003eSold individually: 1 air pillow\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 ft x 8 ft, 21 in tall when inflated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e16-gauge blue PVC vinyl\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSits in the center of the pool, under the winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw151-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eAbove-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw151-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw151-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW151\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW151\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWinter air pillow (ice equalizer)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 pillow (sold individually)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInflated Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 ft x 8 ft x 21 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter of the pool, under the winter cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw151-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619550425153,"sku":"PST-NW151","price":29.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/upv7bjde1wckkdqo3iu5.jpg?v=1789675495"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-4x4-winter-air-pillow-above-ground-nw150","title":"Blue Wave 4' x 4' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, NW150","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw150-wrap, .bwnw150-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw150-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw150-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw150-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw150-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw150-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw150-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw150-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw150-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw150-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw150-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw150-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw150-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw150-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw150-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw150-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw150-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw150-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw150-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw150-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw150-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw150-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw150-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 4' x 4' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, NW150\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw150-subtitle\"\u003eLifts the center of an above-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw150-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW150\u003c\/strong\u003e is a 4 ft x 4 ft winter air pillow for above-ground pools. Inflate it and set it in the center of the pool under the winter cover. The raised center helps keep snow and leaves from collecting in the middle of the cover, and the pillow takes up pressure from expanding ice that would otherwise press on the pool wall and liner.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw150-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003eSold individually: 1 air pillow\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 ft x 4 ft, 21 in tall when inflated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e16-gauge blue PVC vinyl\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSits in the center of the pool, under the winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw150-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eAbove-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw150-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw150-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW150\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW150\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWinter air pillow (ice equalizer)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 pillow (sold individually)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInflated Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 ft x 4 ft x 21 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter of the pool, under the winter cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw150-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619636703297,"sku":"PST-NW150","price":24.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/pmptilynlz6c1vjhtcx0.jpg?v=1789677710"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-4x15-winter-air-pillow-above-ground-nw152","title":"Blue Wave 4' x 15' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, NW152","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw152-wrap, .bwnw152-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw152-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw152-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw152-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw152-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw152-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw152-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw152-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw152-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw152-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw152-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw152-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw152-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw152-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw152-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw152-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw152-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw152-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw152-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw152-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw152-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw152-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw152-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 4' x 15' Winter Air Pillow, Ice Equalizer for Above Ground Pools, NW152\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw152-subtitle\"\u003eLifts the center of an above-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw152-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW152\u003c\/strong\u003e is a 4 ft x 15 ft winter air pillow for above-ground pools. Inflate it and set it in the center of the pool under the winter cover. The raised center helps keep snow and leaves from collecting in the middle of the cover, and the pillow takes up pressure from expanding ice that would otherwise press on the pool wall and liner.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw152-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003eSold individually: 1 air pillow\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 ft x 15 ft, 21 in tall when inflated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e16-gauge blue PVC vinyl\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSits in the center of the pool, under the winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw152-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eAbove-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw152-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw152-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW152\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW152\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWinter air pillow (ice equalizer)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 pillow (sold individually)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInflated Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 ft x 15 ft x 21 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePlacement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCenter of the pool, under the winter cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw152-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619637293121,"sku":"PST-NW152","price":42.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/kirdwwsoyq3yecjrszqm.jpg?v=1789677716"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-2x2-corner-water-tube-in-ground-winter-cover-nw130","title":"Blue Wave 2' x 2' Corner Water Tube for In Ground Winter Covers, NW130","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw130-wrap, .bwnw130-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw130-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw130-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw130-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw130-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw130-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw130-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw130-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw130-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw130-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw130-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw130-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw130-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw130-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw130-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw130-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw130-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw130-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw130-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw130-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw130-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw130-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw130-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 2' x 2' Corner Water Tube for In Ground Winter Covers, NW130\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw130-subtitle\"\u003eExtra anchoring weight for the corners of a winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw130-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW130\u003c\/strong\u003e is \u003cstrong\u003eone 2 ft x 2 ft corner water tube\u003c\/strong\u003e for in-ground pool winter covers. Fill it from a garden hose and set it at a corner of the cover for additional anchoring weight. It is made of 18-gauge blue vinyl.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw130-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003eSold individually: 1 corner tube\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 ft x 2 ft corner size\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdds anchoring weight at the corners of an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e18-gauge blue PVC vinyl, fills from a garden hose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw130-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eCorners of in-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw130-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw130-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW130\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW130\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCorner water tube for winter covers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 tube (sold individually)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 ft x 2 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFill\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater, from a garden hose\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw130-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619637424193,"sku":"PST-NW130","price":17.9,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/epab2ill96zyihqu89xj.jpg?v=1789677721"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-4ft-step-water-tube-in-ground-winter-cover-nw107","title":"Blue Wave 4' Step Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Cover Step Sections, NW107","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw107-wrap, .bwnw107-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw107-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw107-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw107-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw107-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw107-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw107-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw107-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw107-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw107-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw107-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw107-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw107-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw107-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw107-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw107-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw107-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw107-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw107-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw107-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw107-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw107-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw107-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 4' Step Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Cover Step Sections, NW107\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw107-subtitle\"\u003eShort water weight sized for the step section of a winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw107-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW107\u003c\/strong\u003e is \u003cstrong\u003eone 4 ft step water tube\u003c\/strong\u003e made for the step section of an in-ground pool winter cover. The tube is a single chamber of 18-gauge blue vinyl that you fill with a garden hose, lay on the cover over the step, and drain for storage when the pool opens.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw107-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003eSold individually: 1 tube\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 ft long x 1 ft wide, single chamber\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMade for the step section of an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e18-gauge blue PVC vinyl, fills from a garden hose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw107-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eStep sections of in-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw107-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw107-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW107\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW107\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStep section winter cover water tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 tube (sold individually)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTube Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eChambers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw107-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619638636609,"sku":"PST-NW107","price":18.7,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/wkxggpbsxeacymwunk5c.jpg?v=1789677766"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-4ft-step-water-tube-in-ground-winter-cover-2pk-nw107-2","title":"Blue Wave 4' Step Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Cover Step Sections, 2-Pack, NW107-2","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw107-2-wrap, .bwnw107-2-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw107-2-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw107-2-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw107-2-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw107-2-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw107-2-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw107-2-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw107-2-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw107-2-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw107-2-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw107-2-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw107-2-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw107-2-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw107-2-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw107-2-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw107-2-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw107-2-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw107-2-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw107-2-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw107-2-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw107-2-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw107-2-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw107-2-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 4' Step Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Cover Step Sections, 2-Pack, NW107-2\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw107-2-subtitle\"\u003eShort water weight sized for the step section of a winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw107-2-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW107-2\u003c\/strong\u003e is a pack of \u003cstrong\u003e2 step water tubes\u003c\/strong\u003e, each 4 ft long, made for the step section of an in-ground pool winter cover. Each tube is a single chamber of 18-gauge blue vinyl that you fill with a garden hose, lay on the cover over the step, and drain for storage when the pool opens.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw107-2-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003ePack of 2 tubes, each 4 ft long\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 ft long x 1 ft wide, single chamber\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMade for the step section of an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e18-gauge blue PVC vinyl, fills from a garden hose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw107-2-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eStep sections of in-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw107-2-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw107-2-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW107-2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW107-2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStep section winter cover water tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 tubes per pack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTube Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eChambers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw107-2-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619638800449,"sku":"PST-NW107-2","price":35.9,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/zjgtzctfyuulvhbgvvjf.jpg?v=1789677772"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-above-ground-winter-cover-wall-bags-1pk-nw154","title":"Blue Wave Above Ground Winter Cover Wall Bag, NW154","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw154-wrap, .bwnw154-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw154-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw154-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw154-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw154-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw154-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw154-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw154-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw154-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw154-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw154-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw154-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw154-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw154-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw154-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw154-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw154-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw154-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw154-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw154-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw154-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw154-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw154-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave Above Ground Winter Cover Wall Bag, NW154\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw154-subtitle\"\u003eWater weight that fastens to the cable of an above-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw154-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW154\u003c\/strong\u003e is \u003cstrong\u003eone wall bag\u003c\/strong\u003e for weighting an above-ground pool winter cover against wind lift. The bag is 1 ft x 1 ft of 16-gauge blue vinyl that fills with water from a garden hose, with grommets so you can fasten it to the cover cable. Space the bags around the pool on top of the cover, just inside the wall, one every 2 to 3 feet. Check your winter cover's warranty first, because some cover warranties exclude hold-down devices that did not come with the cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw154-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003eSold individually: 1 wall bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 ft x 1 ft, 16-gauge blue PVC vinyl\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrommets fasten each bag to the cover cable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUse one bag every 2 to 3 feet around the pool\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw154-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eAbove-ground pool winter covers held with a cover cable\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw154-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw154-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW154\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW154\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove-ground winter cover wall bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 bag (sold individually)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBag Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpacing\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne bag every 2 to 3 ft around the pool\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw154-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619638931521,"sku":"PST-NW154","price":17.1,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/adhbouwpqvpdmhf6d3eh.jpg?v=1789677776"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-above-ground-winter-cover-wall-bags-4pk-nw155","title":"Blue Wave Above Ground Winter Cover Wall Bags, 4-Pack, NW155","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw155-wrap, .bwnw155-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw155-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw155-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw155-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw155-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw155-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw155-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw155-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw155-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw155-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw155-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw155-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw155-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw155-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw155-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw155-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw155-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw155-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw155-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw155-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw155-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave Above Ground Winter Cover Wall Bags, 4-Pack, NW155\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw155-subtitle\"\u003eWater weight that fastens to the cable of an above-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW155\u003c\/strong\u003e is a pack of \u003cstrong\u003e4 wall bags\u003c\/strong\u003e for weighting an above-ground pool winter cover against wind lift. Each bag is 1 ft x 1 ft of 16-gauge blue vinyl that fills with water from a garden hose, with grommets so you can fasten it to the cover cable. Space the bags around the pool on top of the cover, just inside the wall, one every 2 to 3 feet. Check your winter cover's warranty first, because some cover warranties exclude hold-down devices that did not come with the cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw155-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003ePack of 4 wall bags\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 ft x 1 ft, 16-gauge blue PVC vinyl\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrommets fasten each bag to the cover cable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUse one bag every 2 to 3 feet around the pool\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eAbove-ground pool winter covers held with a cover cable\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw155-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw155-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW155\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW155\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove-ground winter cover wall bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 bags per pack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBag Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpacing\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne bag every 2 to 3 ft around the pool\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619638964289,"sku":"PST-NW155","price":19.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/b6sxuj053ystgk4azdmn.jpg?v=1789677782"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-above-ground-winter-cover-wall-bags-8pk-nw155-2","title":"Blue Wave Above Ground Winter Cover Wall Bags, 8-Pack, NW155-2","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw155-2-wrap, .bwnw155-2-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw155-2-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw155-2-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw155-2-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw155-2-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw155-2-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw155-2-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw155-2-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw155-2-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw155-2-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw155-2-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw155-2-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw155-2-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw155-2-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw155-2-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw155-2-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw155-2-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw155-2-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw155-2-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw155-2-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw155-2-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-2-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-2-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave Above Ground Winter Cover Wall Bags, 8-Pack, NW155-2\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw155-2-subtitle\"\u003eWater weight that fastens to the cable of an above-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-2-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW155-2\u003c\/strong\u003e is a pack of \u003cstrong\u003e8 wall bags\u003c\/strong\u003e for weighting an above-ground pool winter cover against wind lift. Each bag is 1 ft x 1 ft of 16-gauge blue vinyl that fills with water from a garden hose, with grommets so you can fasten it to the cover cable. Space the bags around the pool on top of the cover, just inside the wall, one every 2 to 3 feet. Check your winter cover's warranty first, because some cover warranties exclude hold-down devices that did not come with the cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw155-2-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003ePack of 8 wall bags\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 ft x 1 ft, 16-gauge blue PVC vinyl\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrommets fasten each bag to the cover cable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUse one bag every 2 to 3 feet around the pool\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-2-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eAbove-ground pool winter covers held with a cover cable\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw155-2-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw155-2-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW155-2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW155-2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove-ground winter cover wall bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 bags per pack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBag Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpacing\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne bag every 2 to 3 ft around the pool\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-2-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619638997057,"sku":"PST-NW155-2","price":23.3,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/adhbouwpqvpdmhf6d3eh_a5c136a9-5c3e-4b23-8fd7-7406feb73d16.jpg?v=1789677787"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-above-ground-winter-cover-wall-bags-12pk-nw155-3","title":"Blue Wave Above Ground Winter Cover Wall Bags, 12-Pack, NW155-3","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw155-3-wrap, .bwnw155-3-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw155-3-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw155-3-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw155-3-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw155-3-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw155-3-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw155-3-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw155-3-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw155-3-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw155-3-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw155-3-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw155-3-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw155-3-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw155-3-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw155-3-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw155-3-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw155-3-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw155-3-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw155-3-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw155-3-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw155-3-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-3-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-3-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave Above Ground Winter Cover Wall Bags, 12-Pack, NW155-3\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw155-3-subtitle\"\u003eWater weight that fastens to the cable of an above-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-3-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW155-3\u003c\/strong\u003e is a pack of \u003cstrong\u003e12 wall bags\u003c\/strong\u003e for weighting an above-ground pool winter cover against wind lift. Each bag is 1 ft x 1 ft of 16-gauge blue vinyl that fills with water from a garden hose, with grommets so you can fasten it to the cover cable. Space the bags around the pool on top of the cover, just inside the wall, one every 2 to 3 feet. Check your winter cover's warranty first, because some cover warranties exclude hold-down devices that did not come with the cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw155-3-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003ePack of 12 wall bags\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 ft x 1 ft, 16-gauge blue PVC vinyl\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrommets fasten each bag to the cover cable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUse one bag every 2 to 3 feet around the pool\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-3-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eAbove-ground pool winter covers held with a cover cable\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw155-3-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw155-3-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW155-3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW155-3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbove-ground winter cover wall bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 bags per pack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBag Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpacing\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne bag every 2 to 3 ft around the pool\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw155-3-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619639095361,"sku":"PST-NW155-3","price":26.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/adhbouwpqvpdmhf6d3eh_1ad89efb-dd47-4a84-b145-4cb38c57c435.jpg?v=1789677793"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-8ft-double-chamber-water-tube-in-ground-winter-cover-nw105","title":"Blue Wave 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, NW105","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw105-wrap, .bwnw105-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw105-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw105-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw105-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw105-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw105-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw105-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw105-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw105-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw105-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw105-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw105-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw105-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw105-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw105-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw105-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw105-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw105-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw105-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw105-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw105-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw105-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw105-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, NW105\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw105-subtitle\"\u003eTwo-chamber water weight for an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw105-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW105\u003c\/strong\u003e is \u003cstrong\u003eone 8 ft double chamber water tube\u003c\/strong\u003e for holding down an in-ground pool winter cover. The tube is split into two chambers of 18-gauge blue vinyl, so if one chamber loses its water the other still keeps weight on the cover. Fill the tube with a garden hose, set it along the edge of the cover (use the cover's water bag loops where it has them), and drain it for storage when the pool opens. Use water tubes rather than bricks or sharp blocks, which can cut and scuff a winter cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw105-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003eSold individually: 1 tube\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e8 ft long x 1 ft wide, double chamber\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf one chamber loses water, the other still holds weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e18-gauge blue PVC vinyl, fills from a garden hose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw105-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeaf nets installed over an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw105-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw105-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW105\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW105\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber winter cover water tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 tube (sold individually)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTube Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eChambers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw105-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619639128129,"sku":"PST-NW105","price":21.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/qx6excgof1orbx5zoecs.jpg?v=1789677798"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-8ft-double-chamber-water-tube-in-ground-winter-cover-5pk-nw106","title":"Blue Wave 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 5-Pack, NW106","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw106-wrap, .bwnw106-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw106-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw106-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw106-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw106-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw106-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw106-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw106-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw106-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw106-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw106-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw106-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw106-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw106-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw106-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw106-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw106-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw106-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw106-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw106-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw106-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 5-Pack, NW106\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw106-subtitle\"\u003eTwo-chamber water weight for an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW106\u003c\/strong\u003e is a pack of \u003cstrong\u003e5 double chamber water tubes\u003c\/strong\u003e, each 8 ft long, for holding down an in-ground pool winter cover. Each tube is split into two chambers of 18-gauge blue vinyl, so if one chamber loses its water the other still keeps weight on the cover. Fill the tubes with a garden hose, set them along the edge of the cover (use the cover's water bag loops where it has them), and drain them for storage when the pool opens. Use water tubes rather than bricks or sharp blocks, which can cut and scuff a winter cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw106-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003ePack of 5 tubes, each 8 ft long\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e8 ft long x 1 ft wide, double chamber\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf one chamber loses water, the other still holds weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e18-gauge blue PVC vinyl, fills from a garden hose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeaf nets installed over an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw106-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw106-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW106\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW106\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber winter cover water tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 tubes per pack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTube Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eChambers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619639160897,"sku":"PST-NW106","price":33.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/yrjipfsgfx44ewkixjyy.jpg?v=1789677804"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-8ft-double-chamber-water-tube-in-ground-winter-cover-10pk-nw106-2","title":"Blue Wave 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 10-Pack, NW106-2","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw106-2-wrap, .bwnw106-2-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw106-2-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw106-2-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw106-2-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw106-2-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw106-2-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw106-2-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw106-2-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw106-2-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw106-2-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw106-2-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw106-2-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw106-2-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw106-2-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw106-2-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw106-2-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw106-2-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw106-2-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw106-2-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw106-2-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw106-2-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-2-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-2-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 10-Pack, NW106-2\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw106-2-subtitle\"\u003eTwo-chamber water weight for an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-2-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW106-2\u003c\/strong\u003e is a pack of \u003cstrong\u003e10 double chamber water tubes\u003c\/strong\u003e, each 8 ft long, for holding down an in-ground pool winter cover. Each tube is split into two chambers of 18-gauge blue vinyl, so if one chamber loses its water the other still keeps weight on the cover. Fill the tubes with a garden hose, set them along the edge of the cover (use the cover's water bag loops where it has them), and drain them for storage when the pool opens. Use water tubes rather than bricks or sharp blocks, which can cut and scuff a winter cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw106-2-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003ePack of 10 tubes, each 8 ft long\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e8 ft long x 1 ft wide, double chamber\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf one chamber loses water, the other still holds weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e18-gauge blue PVC vinyl, fills from a garden hose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-2-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeaf nets installed over an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw106-2-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw106-2-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW106-2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW106-2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber winter cover water tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 tubes per pack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTube Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eChambers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-2-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619639193665,"sku":"PST-NW106-2","price":48.3,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/u0pdca0xz71esjzxwyyr_148a3350-feb1-4f47-8477-bb06eafc189b.jpg?v=1789677809"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-8ft-double-chamber-water-tube-in-ground-winter-cover-15pk-nw106-3","title":"Blue Wave 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 15-Pack, NW106-3","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw106-3-wrap, .bwnw106-3-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw106-3-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw106-3-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw106-3-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw106-3-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw106-3-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw106-3-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw106-3-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw106-3-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw106-3-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw106-3-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw106-3-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw106-3-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw106-3-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw106-3-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw106-3-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw106-3-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw106-3-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw106-3-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw106-3-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw106-3-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-3-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-3-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 8' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 15-Pack, NW106-3\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw106-3-subtitle\"\u003eTwo-chamber water weight for an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-3-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW106-3\u003c\/strong\u003e is a pack of \u003cstrong\u003e15 double chamber water tubes\u003c\/strong\u003e, each 8 ft long, for holding down an in-ground pool winter cover. Each tube is split into two chambers of 18-gauge blue vinyl, so if one chamber loses its water the other still keeps weight on the cover. Fill the tubes with a garden hose, set them along the edge of the cover (use the cover's water bag loops where it has them), and drain them for storage when the pool opens. Use water tubes rather than bricks or sharp blocks, which can cut and scuff a winter cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw106-3-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003ePack of 15 tubes, each 8 ft long\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e8 ft long x 1 ft wide, double chamber\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf one chamber loses water, the other still holds weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e18-gauge blue PVC vinyl, fills from a garden hose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-3-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeaf nets installed over an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw106-3-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw106-3-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW106-3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW106-3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber winter cover water tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 tubes per pack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTube Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eChambers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw106-3-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619639390273,"sku":"PST-NW106-3","price":63.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/u0pdca0xz71esjzxwyyr_7fa7b458-56e0-498d-8872-21c66c78a5de.jpg?v=1789677814"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-10ft-double-chamber-water-tube-in-ground-winter-cover-nw125","title":"Blue Wave 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, NW125","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw125-wrap, .bwnw125-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw125-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw125-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw125-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw125-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw125-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw125-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw125-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw125-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw125-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw125-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw125-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw125-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw125-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw125-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw125-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw125-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw125-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw125-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw125-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw125-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw125-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw125-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, NW125\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw125-subtitle\"\u003eTwo-chamber water weight for an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw125-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW125\u003c\/strong\u003e is \u003cstrong\u003eone 10 ft double chamber water tube\u003c\/strong\u003e for holding down an in-ground pool winter cover. The tube is split into two chambers of 18-gauge blue vinyl, so if one chamber loses its water the other still keeps weight on the cover. Fill the tube with a garden hose, set it along the edge of the cover (use the cover's water bag loops where it has them), and drain it for storage when the pool opens. Use water tubes rather than bricks or sharp blocks, which can cut and scuff a winter cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw125-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003eSold individually: 1 tube\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e10 ft long x 1 ft wide, double chamber\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf one chamber loses water, the other still holds weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e18-gauge blue PVC vinyl, fills from a garden hose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw125-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeaf nets installed over an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw125-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw125-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW125\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW125\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber winter cover water tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 tube (sold individually)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTube Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eChambers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw125-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619639423041,"sku":"PST-NW125","price":24.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/i8vvehvijbjksmpjumqm.jpg?v=1789677820"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-10ft-double-chamber-water-tube-in-ground-winter-cover-5pk-nw126","title":"Blue Wave 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 5-Pack, NW126","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw126-wrap, .bwnw126-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw126-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw126-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw126-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw126-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw126-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw126-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw126-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw126-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw126-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw126-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw126-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw126-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw126-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw126-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw126-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw126-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw126-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw126-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw126-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw126-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 5-Pack, NW126\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw126-subtitle\"\u003eTwo-chamber water weight for an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW126\u003c\/strong\u003e is a pack of \u003cstrong\u003e5 double chamber water tubes\u003c\/strong\u003e, each 10 ft long, for holding down an in-ground pool winter cover. Each tube is split into two chambers of 18-gauge blue vinyl, so if one chamber loses its water the other still keeps weight on the cover. Fill the tubes with a garden hose, set them along the edge of the cover (use the cover's water bag loops where it has them), and drain them for storage when the pool opens. Use water tubes rather than bricks or sharp blocks, which can cut and scuff a winter cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw126-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003ePack of 5 tubes, each 10 ft long\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e10 ft long x 1 ft wide, double chamber\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf one chamber loses water, the other still holds weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e18-gauge blue PVC vinyl, fills from a garden hose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeaf nets installed over an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw126-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw126-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW126\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW126\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber winter cover water tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 tubes per pack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTube Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eChambers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619639521345,"sku":"PST-NW126","price":38.7,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/vw4wt8ivj1o4abui4oqf.jpg?v=1789677825"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-10ft-double-chamber-water-tube-in-ground-winter-cover-10pk-nw126-2","title":"Blue Wave 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 10-Pack, NW126-2","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw126-2-wrap, .bwnw126-2-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw126-2-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw126-2-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw126-2-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw126-2-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw126-2-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw126-2-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw126-2-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw126-2-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw126-2-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw126-2-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw126-2-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw126-2-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw126-2-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw126-2-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw126-2-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw126-2-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw126-2-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw126-2-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw126-2-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw126-2-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-2-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-2-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 10-Pack, NW126-2\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw126-2-subtitle\"\u003eTwo-chamber water weight for an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-2-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW126-2\u003c\/strong\u003e is a pack of \u003cstrong\u003e10 double chamber water tubes\u003c\/strong\u003e, each 10 ft long, for holding down an in-ground pool winter cover. Each tube is split into two chambers of 18-gauge blue vinyl, so if one chamber loses its water the other still keeps weight on the cover. Fill the tubes with a garden hose, set them along the edge of the cover (use the cover's water bag loops where it has them), and drain them for storage when the pool opens. Use water tubes rather than bricks or sharp blocks, which can cut and scuff a winter cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw126-2-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003ePack of 10 tubes, each 10 ft long\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e10 ft long x 1 ft wide, double chamber\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf one chamber loses water, the other still holds weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e18-gauge blue PVC vinyl, fills from a garden hose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-2-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeaf nets installed over an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw126-2-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw126-2-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW126-2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW126-2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber winter cover water tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 tubes per pack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTube Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eChambers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-2-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619639652417,"sku":"PST-NW126-2","price":56.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/u0pdca0xz71esjzxwyyr_0933900b-bbbf-4ae2-a3d9-852b2f87dfe8.jpg?v=1789677830"},{"product_id":"blue-wave-10ft-double-chamber-water-tube-in-ground-winter-cover-15pk-nw126-3","title":"Blue Wave 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 15-Pack, NW126-3","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e .bwnw126-3-wrap, .bwnw126-3-wrap * { box-sizing: border-box; } .bwnw126-3-wrap { font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: #1a1a1a; line-height: 1.6; } .bwnw126-3-title { border-left: 4px solid #8a8a8a; padding: 2px 0 2px 14px; margin-bottom: 18px; } .bwnw126-3-title h2 { margin: 0; font-size: 1.45em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; letter-spacing: -0.01em; } .bwnw126-3-subtitle { margin: 3px 0 0; color: #555; font-size: 0.92em; } .bwnw126-3-intro { margin: 0 0 18px; color: #333; } .bwnw126-3-bullets { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 0; list-style: none; } .bwnw126-3-bullets li { position: relative; padding-left: 22px; margin-bottom: 7px; color: #333; } .bwnw126-3-bullets li:before { content: \"\"; position: absolute; left: 4px; top: 0.62em; width: 7px; height: 7px; border-radius: 50%; background: #8a8a8a; } .bwnw126-3-section-heading { font-size: 0.8em; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.07em; color: #2a2a2a; font-weight: 700; margin: 0 0 8px; } .bwnw126-3-specs { width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 20px; font-size: 0.94em; } .bwnw126-3-specs tr { border-bottom: 1px solid #e8e8e8; } .bwnw126-3-specs tr:last-child { border-bottom: none; } .bwnw126-3-specs th { text-align: left; padding: 8px 14px 8px 0; color: #666; font-weight: 600; white-space: nowrap; vertical-align: top; width: 38%; } .bwnw126-3-specs td { padding: 8px 0; color: #1a1a1a; } .bwnw126-3-fits { margin: 0 0 20px; padding: 12px 16px; background: #f7f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #8a8a8a; font-size: 0.93em; color: #333; } .bwnw126-3-fits ul { margin: 6px 0 0; padding-left: 18px; } .bwnw126-3-fits li { margin-bottom: 3px; } .bwnw126-3-perks { display: flex; flex-wrap: wrap; gap: 8px 18px; padding-top: 14px; border-top: 1px solid #e8e8e8; font-size: 0.88em; color: #555; } .bwnw126-3-perks span:before { content: \"\\2713\"; color: #8a8a8a; font-weight: 700; margin-right: 6px; } @media (max-width: 600px) { .bwnw126-3-specs th { width: 46%; } }\u003c\/style\u003e\u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-3-wrap\"\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-3-title\"\u003e \u003ch2\u003eBlue Wave 10' Double Chamber Water Tube, Blue for In Ground Winter Covers, 15-Pack, NW126-3\u003c\/h2\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw126-3-subtitle\"\u003eTwo-chamber water weight for an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/p\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-3-intro\"\u003eThe Blue Wave \u003cstrong\u003eNW126-3\u003c\/strong\u003e is a pack of \u003cstrong\u003e15 double chamber water tubes\u003c\/strong\u003e, each 10 ft long, for holding down an in-ground pool winter cover. Each tube is split into two chambers of 18-gauge blue vinyl, so if one chamber loses its water the other still keeps weight on the cover. Fill the tubes with a garden hose, set them along the edge of the cover (use the cover's water bag loops where it has them), and drain them for storage when the pool opens. Use water tubes rather than bricks or sharp blocks, which can cut and scuff a winter cover.\u003c\/div\u003e \u003cul class=\"bwnw126-3-bullets\"\u003e \u003cli\u003ePack of 15 tubes, each 10 ft long\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e10 ft long x 1 ft wide, double chamber\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf one chamber loses water, the other still holds weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e18-gauge blue PVC vinyl, fills from a garden hose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/li\u003e \u003c\/ul\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-3-fits\"\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn-ground pool winter covers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeaf nets installed over an in-ground winter cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003cp class=\"bwnw126-3-section-heading\"\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/p\u003e \u003ctable class=\"bwnw126-3-specs\"\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue Wave\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart Number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNW126-3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSKU\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePST-NW126-3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble chamber winter cover water tube\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack Quantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 tubes per pack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTube Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ft x 1 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eChambers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18-gauge PVC vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90-day limited warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \u003c\/table\u003e \u003cdiv class=\"bwnw126-3-perks\"\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e30-Day Returns\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e90-Day Limited Warranty\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003eAuthorized Blue Wave Dealer\u003c\/span\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e \u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Blue Wave","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44619639849025,"sku":"PST-NW126-3","price":74.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0633\/1623\/0209\/files\/u0pdca0xz71esjzxwyyr_d57296be-fcde-49a0-9fa0-5082802cacb2.jpg?v=1789677836"}],"url":"https:\/\/www.pstpoolsupplies.com\/collections\/winter-pool-air-pillows-and-water-tubes.oembed?page=3","provider":"PST Pool Supplies","version":"1.0","type":"link"}